Jeep 2013 Wrangler Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Jeep Jeep-2013-Jeep-Wrangler-Owners-Manual-817422 jeep-2013-jeep-wrangler-owners-manual-817422 jeep pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 666

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2013 Wrangler

2013
OWNER’S MANUAL

Chrysler Group LLC
13JK72-126-AF

Sixth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Wrangler
Includes Wrangler Unlimited

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
time to become familiar with your vehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a “Starting And Operating” for further information.
four-wheel drive vehicle.

INTRODUCTION 5

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

ROLLOVER WARNING

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.

unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track, if
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- other vehicles may not.
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other

6 INTRODUCTION

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always
buckle up.

Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 7

8 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read
this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
Vehicle Identification Number
number also appears underbody, on the right side of the NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
frame rail near the center of the vehicle, as well as on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.

INTRODUCTION 9

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

䡵 STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .17

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . .17 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .23 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . .24 䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Remote Key Unlock On First Press . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Sound Horn On Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .28

▫ Upper Half Door Window Removal — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . . . . . .35
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .40

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .43

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

䡵 REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor
Lockout — Four-Door Models Only . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .56
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .56
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .57

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .67
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .99
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
keys without the bag, ask your authorized dealer to give
you the number. The key code can also be obtained by
your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.

Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCESSORY)
position.

Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN
4 — START

3. Push the ignition key inward.
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, and remove
the key.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED

To Release The Steering Wheel Lock

Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction, and the key
is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will lock.

Insert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheel slightly
to the left or right, to disengage the lock.

To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel

NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the
lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel one– Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
half revolution from the straight ahead position, turn off
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the engine, and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheel
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
slightly in both directions until the lock engages.
PARK unless the key is in the ON/RUN position, and the
brake pedal is depressed.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.

Always remove the Sentry Keys® from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key® is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
If you have two valid Sentry Keys®, you can program
within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime
new Sentry Keys® to the system by performing the
will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
following procedure:
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s)
three seconds and then turn off.
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
The
new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote Key2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
less
Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
during
this procedure.
least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Customer Key Programming

Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
and remove the first key.
do not have a programmed Sentry Key®, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s
sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed.
All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at
position and remove the second key.
the time of service to be reprogrammed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door,
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
for an additional 15 minutes.
subject to the following conditions:
NOTE: The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the
• This device must accept any interference that may be Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the
received, including interference that may cause unde- differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the
sired operation.
future, you will need to know which mode has been
activated in order to deactivate it.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Rearming The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. While If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm pro- horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
vides both audible and visible signals when alarming. The after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, the park rearm itself.
lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three
General Information

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
and swing gate, or when you use the power door lock
switch while the door is open. After all the doors are The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light (located on vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 sec- Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
onds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
During this 16-second arming period, opening any door transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
or the swing gate will cancel the arming. If the Vehicle (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
Security Alarm is successfully set, the Vehicle Security the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
Security Alarm is armed.
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
To Disarm The System
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, or
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
To Arm The System

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plungswitch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
ers or the driver’s door lock cylinder will not disarm
NOTE:
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
NOTE:

• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
(extreme bottom position).
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, with metal objects.
swing gate, and activate the Panic Alarm from a maxi- To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
mum distance of 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless
Press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
once to unlock the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
all the doors and swing gate. When the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button is pressed, the Illuminated Entry will
initiate and the parking lights will flash twice.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED

Remote Key Unlock On First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors and swing gate on the first
press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

Three Button RKE Transmitter

• For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform- Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate
ing the following steps:
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed 5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
RKE transmitter.
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button
for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.

4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmittransmitter.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash and the
NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Sound Horn On Lock

The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be Using The Panic Alarm
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
proceed as follows:
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time, or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
following steps:
1. Press the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
10 seconds.
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds), the system.
press the RKE transmitter PANIC button. Release both
buttons.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature outside of
the vehicle by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
button with the ignition in the LOCK position and the
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitkey removed.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElecSecurity Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnRKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vederstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforhicle Security Alarm.
mation.
The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be reactivated
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
by repeating this procedure.
following steps:
Programming Additional Transmitters
1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to
Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key Programming.”
10 seconds.
To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock

2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCK button. contact your authorized dealer for details.
Release both buttons.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
mobile or CB radios.
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Transmitter Battery Replacement
General Information

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apreceived including interference that may cause unde- ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
sired operation.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly aptransmitter apart. Use extreme care not to damage the
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
seal or internal components.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves

2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
may reduce this range.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Use Remote Start

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

All of the following conditions must be met before the • Vehicle theft alarm not active
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
to the ON/RUN position.
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
DOORS

CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped

Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped

Grasp the half door window and pull upward.

1. Grasp the half door window and line up the pins with
the pockets in the lower door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully
seated.
Front Door Removal

WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
Upper Half Door Window

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Door Removal Warning Label

Hinge Pin Screw

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage. 3. Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instrument panel by pressing the tab at the top of the connector
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower
and pulling to disconnect.
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® head driver).
NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, pull the
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in red latch down. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing
the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.
disconnected.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful
not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror
may damage the paint.
5. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
from their hinges and remove the door.
NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
Door Strap/Harness Location
1 — Wiring Harness (follow the harness up and under the instrument panel to the connector)
2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap

WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Door Removal Warning Label

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

Hinge Pin Screw

3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.

2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower 4. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of the
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx® head driver).
B-pillar.
NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

Trim Access Door

5. Unplug the wiring harness connector.

Red Connector Latch

6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.

7. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins
NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, push
from their hinges and remove the door.
the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch
on one end (right) of the connector. This will unlock the NOTE: Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.
connector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
enabling the harness to be disconnected.
opposite order.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, press
the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and close
the door. To UNLOCK the door press the rocker lever
rearward.

Manual Door Lock (Full Frame Doors)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

WARNING!

Manual Door Lock (Half Doors)

NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle
is used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, glove
compartment, and console storage.

• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle , or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Press the switch forward to lock the doors, and
rearward to unlock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch

WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key in or near the vehicle , or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.

The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/
RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in
the LOCK position.

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with 3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
power door locks if:
1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature is 4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
enabled.
2. The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the
transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.

5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.

3. The driver door is opened.

NOTE: Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit”
feature in accordance with local laws.

4. The doors were not previously unlocked.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with ChildProtection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the rocker lever rearward (unlocked position), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.

WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the radio. Press the switch downward
to open the window and upward to close the window.
Power Window Switches

The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window.
NOTE: The switches will continue to function for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key has been turned to the
LOCK position, or until a front door is opened.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Four-Door Models

Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger The window lockout switch (located between the front
window, and the lower right switch controls the right window switches) allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located on the back of the center floor
rear passenger window.
console. To disable the window controls, press the winAuto-Down
dow lockout button downward. To enable the window
Both the driver and front passenger window switches controls, press the window lockout button upward.
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To partially open the window, press halfway to the first
detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
Window Lockout Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

Rear Power Windows — Four-Door Models

Wind Buffeting

The rear passenger window switches are located on the
back of the center floor console. Press the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the
window.

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized
by adjusting the window opening.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or by activating
the power door lock switches located on the front doors.

Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door Models)

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To open the swing gate, press the button on the gate
handle.

CAUTION!
Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the
rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade will
result.

WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the flip-up window closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Gate Handle

NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
to close the swing gate (hard top models only).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
Some of the most important safety features in your
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
vehicle are the restraint systems:
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
all passengers
item in a seat — if equipped
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front Please pay close attention to the information in this
passenger
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
equipped
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
CHildren (LATCH).
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.

seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
buckled up in a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt
properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured
in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster

2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.

WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING! (Continued)
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat and next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to
go around your lap.

Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
NOTE: The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the driver and front passenger (if equipped with
front passenger BeltAlert®) seat belt is buckled. For
further information, refer to “Enhanced Seat Belt Use
Reminder System (BeltAlert®)”.

Removing Slack From Belt

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor
Lockout — Four-Door Models Only
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the 60% rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
• If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.

WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your authorized dealer for service. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt anchorage
shoulder belt.
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage near
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach
anchor point.
the position that serves you best.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

WARNING!

Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will feature for each seating position.
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
Driver
Center
Passenger
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
Second
ALR
ALR
ALR
it is locked in position.
Row
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of
injury in a collision.

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
the entire belt is extracted.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked.
The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Energy Management Feature

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.

WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert®)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
These devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
pants, including those in child restraints.
fastened.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretenduration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
notification.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the best way to keep the baby safe.
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Seat Belt Extender
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
deactivating BeltAlert®.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with long enough. When it is not required, remove the exBeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
tender and store it.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front
Air Bag is mounted in the steering wheel. The Advanced 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
Front Passenger Air Bag is mounted in the instrument 2 — Knee Bolster
panel, above the glove compartment. The letters SRS are
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
embossed on the air bag covers.
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SABs are marked with
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
seats.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front NOTE:
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Bag System Components

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
system components:
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
• Air Bag Warning Light
may receive information from the front impact sensors.
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB), do not use
accessory seat covers or place objects between you
and the SAB; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.

• If your vehicle is equipped with SAB, do not attach
cupholders or any other objects on or around the
door. The inflating SAB could drive the objects
into occupants, causing serious injury.
• Do not cover or place items on the air bag covers.
These items may cause serious injury during inflation.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

(Continued)

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SAB) — If Equipped

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB during deployment could
cause you to be severely injured or killed.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location

SAB air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Occupants, including children who are up
against or very close to SAB air bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should
not lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the SAB air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint. Always sit upright as possible

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint,
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
and weight of the child.
required for this vehicle.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB air bags during impacts that The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags is required in a frontal or side collision.
require air bag occupant protection.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SupplemenThe Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the tal Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if equipped, and
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
the severity and type of impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.

The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN positions. If the key is in the
LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light for four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial startup.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Inflator Units — If Equipped

Front And Side Impact Sensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags Inflator determining appropriate response to impact events.
Units (if equipped) are designed to activate only in
Enhanced Accident Response System
certain side collisions.
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side communication network remains intact, and the power
air bags to inflate, based on several factors, including the remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the
severity and type of collision.
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident
Based on several factors, including the severity and type Response System perform the following functions:
of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of • Cut off fuel to the engine.
the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of non-toxic
gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or
if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag • Unlock the doors automatically.
inflates. This especially applies to children.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.

you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.

• As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
or all of the following may occur:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s infront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!
• Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air
bags, seat belt pretensioner, and seat belt retractor
assembly replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

WARNING! (Continued)
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
These data can help provide a better understanding of
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.

Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. the rear seats rather than in the front.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- There are different sizes and types of restraints for
ment, can read the information if they have access to the children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
vehicle or the EDR.
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm

WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Infants and
Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large
for Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat

Recommended Type of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a
Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardreach the highest weight or height allowed by their
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
convertible child seat.
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
WARNING!
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
Infants And Child Restraints

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown

air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats

way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

Latch Positions (Four-Door Models)

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
position
Latch Positions (Two-Door Models)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?

Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

Yes, center position
only.

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.

Latch Anchorages (Two-Door Models)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback, near to the
floor.

Latch Anchorages (Four-Door Models)

Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH

WARNING!

Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)

This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuequipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower restraint systems will be installed as described here.
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcBelt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufaceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
turer’s instructions.
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
in any direction.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.

WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle

Four-Door Models
Two-Door Models

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?

Weight limit of the
Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Yes, center position only.
Yes
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.

Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.

3.
4.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
in any direction.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
“click.”
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Second Row Captains Chairs

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.

Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
Transporting Pets
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
Drive moderately during the first 500 miles (800 km). the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
mental and should be avoided. Trailer tow is not recom- considered a normal part of the break-in and not intermended during break in period.
preted as an indication of difficulty.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SAFETY TIPS

Exhaust Gas

Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.

WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system.
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the comThe light should come on and remain on for four
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
not lit during starting, see your authorized
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ Cancel Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

▫ Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a Mobile
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .113
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
䡵 Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Help Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

▫ Dial by Saying a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Call by Saying a Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook . . .122
▫ Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry . . . . . . . .124

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . .
▫ List All Names in the Uconnect® Phonebook . .125
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .153
. . . . . . . . . . .154
— If
. . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

▫ Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .134

▫ Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

▫ Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models . . . . . .158

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .147

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .147

▫ Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

▫ Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

▫ Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .167
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .170
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

▫ Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .173
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .176
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 䡵 DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models .
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models .
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
䡵 DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET . . . . . . . . . . . .184
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .188
▫ Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

.193
.193
.195
.198
.198

▫ Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models . .202

▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 䡵 FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Glovebox Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Freedom Top™ Storage Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .191

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

▫ Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

▫ Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

䡵 SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS . . . .
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top . .
▫ Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top . . .
▫ Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 DOOR FRAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Putting Up The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models . . .220
▫ Door Frame Installation — Four-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
䡵 SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . .225

. . . .253
. . . .256
. . . .260
. . . .265
. . . .275
. . . .284

▫ Opening The Sunrider® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Closing The Sunrider®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

▫ Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . .227

䡵 SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287

▫ Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . .231

▫ Opening The Sunrider® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

▫ Lowering The Soft Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

▫ Closing The Sunrider®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 FOLDING WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD
TOP ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Lowering The Windshield And Removing
Side Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . .297
▫ Raising The Windshield And Replacing
Side Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . .298

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Outside Rearview Mirror

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
The power mirror switch is located on the center of the direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
instrument panel, below the climate controls. A rotary position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster if equipped. Some vehicles may
not be equipped with rear window defroster, in this case
the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to
“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Power Mirror Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Vanity Mirrors

Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED

Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, inmirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alcover upward.
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.

Vanity Mirror

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and
has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be
1–877–855–8400.
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
• Canadian Residents - visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call, phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is
available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
1-800-465–2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
For Uconnect® customer support:

Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
The radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped)
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
will contain the two control buttons (Uconnect®
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
button and Voice Command
Phone
details.
button) that will enable you to access the
system. When you press the button you will hear the The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehiword Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep is your cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
signal to give a command.
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
NOTE: The driver side upper windshield trim contains
switch), if so equipped.
the microphone for the Uconnect® Phone.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
Voice Command Button
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
Actual button location may vary with the ra- certain radios.
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone Button

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
prompt.

• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

• For certain operations, compound commands can be Voice Command Tree
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
“Phone Pairing”, the following compound command
can be said: “Setup Phone Pairing”.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® webknow your options at any prompt, say “Help” following site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play all the options The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
pairing instructions:
at any prompt if you ask for help.
Help Command

To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press • Press the
button to begin.
button and follow the audible prompts for directhe
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
tions. All Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
button on the radio control head.
the
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Phone”
Cancel Command
and follow the audible prompts.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
few instances the system will take you back to the
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
previous menu.
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone to a Mobile Phone
after the initial pairing process.
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
• Press the
button to begin.
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being • The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority • The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
of certain radios.
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
Call by Saying a Name
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
button to begin.
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile • Press the
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Call”.
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

• The system will prompt you to say the name of the phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
person you want to call.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example, • To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect®)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previName” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
Uconnect® Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downappear in the display of certain radios.
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
Transfer From Mobile Phone
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
instead of “Bob”.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
phonebook.
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonedeleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
book entry, if desired.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next • When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
phone connection.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
button to begin.
• Press the
Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 • You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati- • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
deleted or edited.
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
button to begin.
• Press the
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say feature.
“Phonebook Edit”.

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
when the vehicle is not in motion.
wish to delete.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
button to begin.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • Press the
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
“Phonebook Erase All”.
button while the
from the list, press the
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say • The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you
“Delete”.
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language • The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • The selected number will be dialed.
deleted or edited.
Phone Call Features
List All Names in the Uconnect® Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• Press the
button to begin.
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
“Phonebook List Names”.
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the mobile service provider for the features that you have.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
button
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
during the playing of the desired name, and say
“Call”.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
button to accept the call. To reject the Progress
call. Press the
call, press and hold the
button until you hear a single
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
Currently in Progress
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
If a call is currently in progress and you have another in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
call waiting that you normally hear when using your to “Conference Call” in this section.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress

button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
butbring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ton until you hear a single beep.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatCall Termination
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
butswitched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
Conference Call
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
double beep indicating that the two calls have been phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
joined into one conference call.
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Redial
• Press the

button to begin.

the call on the Uconnect® Phone and transfer of the call
to the mobile phone.

• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mo• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.

bile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
Uconnect® Phone Features
Call Continuation
Language Selection
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is using:
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- • Press the
button to begin.
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue
the name of the language you wish to switch to
on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call ends, or
English, Espanol, or Francais.
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
language selection.
operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
button to begin.
• Press the
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonethe paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languageThis feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
specific and usable across all languages.
Mexico.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
number for your area.
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
reachable:

• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your NOTE:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
for the mobile phone directly.
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069
for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for
WARNING!
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance
To use you Uconnect® Phone System in an emercoverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information
gency, your mobile phone must be:
Booklet and the 24-Hour Towing Assistance references.
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect® System,
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• and have network coverage.
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:

“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging

To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
“Towing Assistance”.
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
• Press the

button to begin.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
can press the
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.
with Automated Systems”.
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
Working with Automated Systems
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
This method is used in instances where one generally has automated customer service center menu structure, and
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while to leave a number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored Uconnect® Phonebook entries
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
system or an automated service, such as a paging service entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send”. The
or automated customer service line. Some services re- call and then press the
system
will
prompt
you
to
enter
the name or number and
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
say
the
name
of
the
phonebook
entry you wish to send.
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence tones over the phone.
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
Voice Mail Calling

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off

• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
network configurations. This is normal.
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
button to begin.
out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Press the
use of this feature.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say:
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.

– “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
– “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.

When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the

button.

• Following the beep, say “Mute”.

In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
button.
• Press the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- • Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Advanced Phone Connectivity

List Paired Mobile Phone Names

Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone

• Press the

button to begin.

The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”.
button • The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
and say “Transfer Call”.
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
button and say “Sebeing announced, press the
Uconnect® Phone and Mobile Phone
lect” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Select Another Mobile Phone

Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones

This feature allows you to select and start using another • Press the
button to begin.
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
prompts.
button at any time while • You can also press the
• You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
you wish to select.
wish to delete.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial”.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogrunning, all windows closed, and the blower fan
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
switched off.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce- This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
dures:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Training

From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from Reset
radio mode):
• Press the
button.
button for five seconds until
• Press and hold the
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
the session begins, or,
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
button and say the “Voice Training”,
• Press the
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” comand other settings in all language modes. The System will
mand.
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish acFor best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
cents, the system may not always work for some.
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• When navigating through an automated system such
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
Speak normally without pausing, just as you would speak
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
not in motion is recommended.
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
during a Voice Command period.
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
Performance is maximized under:
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo• low-to-medium blower setting,
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
entries are not similar.
• low road noise,
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
• smooth road surface,
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• fully closed windows,
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• dry weather condition.

Voice Command
•

•
•
•
•

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
not the Uconnect® Phone.
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.

• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

Read Messages:

Send Messages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will a new message:
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• Press the
button.
If you wish to hear the new message:
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
button.
• Press the
“SMS Send” or “Send Messages”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages”.
“List Messages”. There are 20 preset messages.
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
button while the
To send a message, press the
you.
system is listing the message and say “Send”.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
number of the person you wish to send the message to.

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

List of Preset Messages:

11. See You in 15 minutes

1. Yes

12. I am on my way

2. No

13. I’ll be late

3. Where are you?

14. Are you there yet?

4. I need more direction.

15. Where are we meeting?

5. L O L

16. Can this wait?

6. Why

17. Bye for now

7. I love you

18. When can we meet

8. Call me

19. Send number to call

9. Call me later

20. Start without me

10. Thanks

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF

Bluetooth® Communication Link

Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
sages.
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
button.
• Press the
Bluetooth® ON mode.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Power-Up
“Setup, Incoming Message Announcement,” you will
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
then be given a choice to change it.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
call

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
language
list names

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
previous
record again
redial

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

General Information

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
following conditions:
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,
the party responsible for compliance could void the
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
• This device must accept any interference received,
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
including interference that may cause undesired opmay be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
eration.
voice level.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.

Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.

button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
command.
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen for set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Commands
main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands:
times. Local commands are available if the supported
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing the Volume
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).

• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Radio AM

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)

• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Disc Mode

Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode

To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
may say the following commands:
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:

Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:

• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
one of the following commands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
– “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)

• “Main menu setup” or

• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)

• “Tutorial”

Setup

• “Voice Training”

• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”

To switch to system setup, you may say one of the NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep
Command
following:
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
• “Change to setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Change to setup”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Voice Training

SEATS

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® vehicle.
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.

Manual Seat Adjustment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat; push
downward on the handle to lower the seat.

Seat Height Adjustment

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Seatback Recline
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to
the desired position and release the handle. Lift the
handle to return the seatback to an upright position.

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two-Door
Models
Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear of the
vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward.

Recline Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

Easy Entry Lever

Easy Entry Seat

To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the seatback
upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the
track locks.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the
track regardless of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used
during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting
position.
Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two-Door Models
This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward
the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear
seats.
Driver’s Seat
Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback
to its full forward position.

Recline Lever

Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument
panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat
forward (Easy Entry).

Tip n’ Slide

Passenger Seat
In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger seat is also
equipped with Tip n’ Slide. This feature allows for easier
entry for rear passengers.

Easy Entry Lever

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

With the seat forward, pull the entire seat assembly Heated Seats — If Equipped
toward the instrument panel.
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Tip n’ Slide

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to
one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn
OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Head Restraints

Front Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.

Adjustment Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head restraints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on
child seat tether routing.

1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.

Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.

Rear Seat Release

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.

Removing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models

WARNING!

Folding Rear Seat

3. Return the seat to the normal position.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats are
fully latched.

4. Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and
1. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 and 2
firmly lock the seat into position.
under “Fold And Tumble Rear Seat” in this section.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

2. Press down on the release bar on each side, and pull Replacing The Rear Seat — Two-Door Models
the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
3. Remove the seat from the vehicle.

WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the
rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle.
• The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four-Door Models

Release Bar Location

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

To Fold Down The Rear Seat

• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to Locate the release lever (upper outboard side of seat), and
lift it upward until the seatback releases.
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.

WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

Release Levers

Slowly fold down the seatback.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

To Raise The Rear Seat

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference Release both the hood latches.
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the center
shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use. If
you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make sure
your seatback is fully latched.

WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.

Hood Latch

Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the
left side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the LIGHTS
safety latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the
Multifunction Lever
hood.
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
and turn signals. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

Headlights And Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.

Multifunction Lever

Headlight Switch

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position (third detent). When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To turn the
Automatic System off, turn the end of the multifunction
lever out of the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

NOTE:

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more
than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
Turn Signal Operation

If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you, to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
High/Low Beam Switch

Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is door is opened.
released.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parkFront Fog Lights
ing lights or headlights are on.
The front fog light switch is located on the multiRotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
function lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the
the parking lights or headlights are on.
end of the lever.
Flash-To-Pass

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
The headlights come on at a low intensity level when
shifted into any position other than PARK (auto transmission) or when the vehicle begins to move (manual
transmission).
NOTE: The Daytime Running Light on the same side of
the vehicle as the active turn signal will turn off automatically when a turn signal is in operation and turn on
again when the turn signal is not operating.
Interior Lights

Dimmer Control

The overhead light will turn on when a door is opened. It
may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer
control is left in the dome light position. Turn the ignition
switch ON to restore the overhead light operation.

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Courtesy/Reading Lights

A courtesy light is also found in the rear of the center
console. You can turn this light on and off from the
dimmer control in the multifunction lever. This light is
also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry
System.

Two courtesy/reading lights are located in the bottom of the
rearview mirror. You can turn these lights on and off from
the switches in the mirror or from the dimmer control in the
multifunction lever. These lights are also controlled automatically by the Illuminated Entry System.
Cargo Lamp

The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the control for the dimmer
switch on the multifunction lever fully upward, or if
equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The sports bar reading lights (available on four-door
models) can be turned on by pressing the switches,
located on either side of the lens. Press a switch a second
time to turn the light off.
Courtesy/Reading Light Switches

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

The rear cargo light may be turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light off.

Sports Bar Reading Light
Rear Cargo Light

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is
also known as the “Party” mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever.
For information on using the rear window wiper/washer,
refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.

CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position for one of five intermittent settings.
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to
18 seconds.

Front Wiper Control

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay
range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or
three wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will
operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off.

WARNING!
Front Wiper Control

NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Mist Control

TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull upwards on
the lever to lock the column firmly in place.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.

Tilt Steering Column Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate

Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL

2 — RES +
3 — SET -

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed

To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will above 20 mph (32 km/h).
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inand on level ground before pressing the SET button.
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
vehicle set speed.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
moderate hills is normal.
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets
that can provide power for accessories designed for use
with the standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is powered from the ignition
switch. Power is available when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position.

Front Power Outlet

When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used
in the power outlet, it heats when pushed in and pops out
automatically when ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

A second power outlet is located inside the center console On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a
and is powered directly from the vehicle battery.
third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area.

CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
3 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer
(Opt.)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
mobile phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.

(Continued)

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
front of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.

Power Inverter

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed, there
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating will be a delay of approximately one second before the
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter inverter indicator light turns ON.
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
WARNING!
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
To avoid serious injury or death:
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
The power inverter switch is located • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
on the instrument panel below the • Do not touch with wet hands.
climate controls. To turn on the power • Close the lid when not in use.
outlet, press the switch once. The indi- • If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
cator light will illuminate. Press the
shock and failure.
switch a second time to turn the power
inverter outlet off.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

Rear Cupholders

Front Cupholders

The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center
console.

The front cupholders are located in the center console.

Front Cupholders

Rear Cupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The lockable glovebox storage compartment is located on
the passenger side of the lower instrument panel. Pull
outward on the handle/latch to open the compartment.

Console Storage Compartment
To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert the
ignition key and turn. To open the storage compartment,
press the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

There is an extra storage area underneath the console lid. Rear Storage Compartment
The console lid has an integrated paper clip feature that The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by
can hold small items.
a spring-loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage
compartment cover, use the following procedure:
NOTE: The rear storage compartment latch should not
be used as cargo tie-down.
1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, so it is
parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Open the rear compartment cover.
Center Console Lid Storage

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
same time for extended periods of time.
Removing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models

Rear Storage Cover

DUAL TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the

1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Four door frame attachment knobs
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
• Two rear window roll up straps
• Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)
• Two rear swing gate brackets

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three- 4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Repivot brackets. Remove the soft top from the vehicle
moval” in this section.
and store in a clean, dry location.
3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket NOTE: To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you may
screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx® head driver. carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the 6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Threepivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel InstalTorx® head driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar
lation” in this section.
cover. Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe
Installing The Soft Top — Two-Door Models
place.
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in
this section.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
top removal:
• Right and left door frames
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door
models, six for four-door models)
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal” in this section.
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.
4. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps to
reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle,
proceed to step #5.
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzip the
sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the
sports bar with the four screws that were removed
using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Re-cover and
re-zip the sport bar covers.

b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the
bows pointing forward and the curved portion of
the bows facing upward.
c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

NOTE: To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may
carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet.

CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
d. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30 screws if they are overtightened.
Torx® head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or 5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for
bottom of rear window) and set aside.
overtighten.

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top. hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
cover for shipping only.
same time for extended periods of time.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
Removing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models
top wrap.
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
following items:
The Soft Top” in this section.
• Right and left door frames
DUAL TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS — IF
• Six door frame attachment knobs
EQUIPPED
• Right and left quarter windows
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
• Rear window
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
• Two rear window roll up straps
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
• Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
• Two rear swing gate brackets

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three- 4. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle, slide the
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Retether strap up the side bow (both sides).
moval” in this section.
3. Unbutton the side bow tether strap (both sides).

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. The tether strap must be hooked onto the pivot
bracket prior to removal of soft top from vehicle (both
sides).

7. Lift the soft top in a upward motion to release the
pivot bracket from the sport bar bracket.
6. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket
screws (two per side) from the sport bar using a #T30
Torx® head driver.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

8. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a 9. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Threeclean, dry location (another person may be needed to
Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Instalhelp with this operation).
lation” in this section.
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
the bundle up, the other to remove the brackets.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Installing The Soft Top — Four-Door Models

3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.

NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up
only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in 4. Install the soft top with the pivot brackets above the
this section.
sport bar brackets, lower the soft top into the sport bar
bracket slots in a downward motion to lock tab on soft
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
top. You will need to lift the top to get the brackets to
top removal:
line up. (Another person may be needed to help with
• Right and left door frames
this operation.)
• Six door frame attachment knobs
NOTE: If you are doing this alone, use one arm to hold
• Right and left quarter windows
the soft top up, the other to align the brackets.
• Rear window
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal” in this section.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

5. Lower the pivot bracket onto the sport bar bracket
mounting tab in a downward motion to lock into tab.

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30
Torx® head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.

CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
7. Remove the tether strap from the pivot bracket.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

8. Using the plastic reinforcement as a handle remove the
tether strap from the bracket hook by sliding strap up
off hook and slide down the side bow (both sides).

10. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for bottom
of rear window) and set aside.
9. Button the side bow tether strap (both sides).

NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
11. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
12. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
The Soft Top” in this section.
FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
bodyside, or fully removed.

CAUTION!

• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage,
etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry
any additional loads other than environmental
(rain, snow, etc.).

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.
• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicles interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicles interior.
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE: Left panel must be removed before removing
right panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side.
2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on the overhead speaker bar assembly) counterclockwise until
they can be removed.

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from the center
of the roof panel.

5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the
windshield.
4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above the shoulder belt anchorage).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

Freedom Top™ Storage Bag
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top™ Modular Hard
Top, come with a Freedom Top™ storage bag that allows
you to store your Freedom Top™ panels. The storage bag
contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are
facing downward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap. Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and
fold it back.

6. Remove the left-hand panel.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps above
except for Step 3.

NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing downward.

Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag with the
latches facing upward.
Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located at the center of the
divider.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.
prior to inserting the panel into the bag.

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of the bag)
through the loops.

Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and
loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to
Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat.
straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clips at
the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages,
located at the base of the rear seat.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard Top
Removed
1. Turn the left and right panels over and move the
spacer block (located on the rear of the panel) upward
90 degrees.

Front Panel(s) Installation
NOTE: Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there
is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are sitting
flush with the body.
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The front panel(s) must be positioned properly 4. Remove the six Torx® head screws that secure the
hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside)
to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the windshield frame
using a #40 Torx® head driver.
so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the
panels are sitting flush with the body.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of
the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)
Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx® head screws that secure the
hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using
a #40 Torx® head driver (Four–Door Only).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of 7. Release the red locking tab by pulling outward to the
the vehicle.
right.

Wire Harness Connector

Red Locking Tab

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

8. To remove the wiring harness press the tab and pull
downward to disconnect.

Pinch Grip On Hose

10. Close the swing gate.
Press Tab To Disconnect

9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips on hose
connector and pull downward.

11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the Freedom Top.
Rear Hard Top Installation

NOTE:
• The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body
should be torqued to 66 in lb +/- 22 in lb (7.5 N·m +/2.5 N·m)
• It is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstalling washer hose. Push on until click is heard.

NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top DOOR FRAME
usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the
hard top.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform
gap between the lift glass and hard top.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• Opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s
interior.
(Continued)

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE:
• Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door
frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on publicroads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.

Door Frame Removal
1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment
knobs (two per door).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

WARNING!
Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door
frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands
are not used.
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the
front of the door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to
remove the frame from the vehicle.

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for NOTE:
storage. Store in a secure location.
• Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door
frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
• Do not drive your vehicle on publicroads with the
doors removed as you will lose the protection that they
can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models
1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, behind the door opening.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip it over
the metal side bar and then clip the rear, making sure
that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched
by the door frame.

3. After the door frame pin has been set into the body
side hole, carefully set the front of the door frame into
the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and tighten both
knobs. Repeat on the other side.

Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models
1. Install the rear door frame first.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
side, just behind the rear door opening.

3. Position the top of the door frame against the metal
sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not
to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to
ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the
front of the rear door.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to hold the 6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making
door rail in position.
sure that the material for the side bar cover is not
pinched by the door frame.
5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield.

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

7. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top 9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most knob, and
of the front of the rear door frame. Ensure the seals are
then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the
other side.
installed correctly to avoid water leaks.

8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front
knob (long knob). Then, install the middle knob (short
knob) through the front and rear door frames and
screw into the top of the B-pillar.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
Please visit the owners section of Jeep.com for instructhe top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F
tional videos.
(5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or
roll the rear or side curtains.
SOFT TOP — TWO-DOOR MODELS

CAUTION!

The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.

CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
(Continued)

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.

• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.

WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top
Refer to “Lowering The Soft Top” in this section for
further information.
1. Remove the side windows.

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove the back window.

3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.

4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

5. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
that they rest on top of the soft top.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Release the Sunrider® latch (both sides).

7. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

NOTE: Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the
vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top
Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this section for further
information.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider® latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Engage header latches.

3. Install rear corner panels.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

4. Install the back window.

5. Install the side windows.

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door 7. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so can
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this
step for the opposite side.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

Lowering The Soft Top

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
Sail Panel
Body Side Retainer

6
7
8
9

—
—
—
—

Quarter Window
Check Strap
Front Retainer — Quarter Window
Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.

1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the
loops on the windshield.

4. Open the swing gate.

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove
the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out
of the swing gate brackets.

• Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
bracket on both the left and right sides.
unzip the window.

7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.

10. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat
8. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the top and rear
this step on the opposite side.
edge of the side window.

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
that they rest on top of the soft top.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14. Completely release the latches from the loops on the
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
windshield frame. If your vehicle is not equipped
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
with the Sunrider® package, proceed to Step 15.
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over
the Sunrider® link (Sunrider® Models only).

17. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
prevent possible damage to the rear center highmounted brake light. Move to the front of the vehicle.
16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails (SunGrasp the side bow behind the header and lift the
rider® Models only).
top, folding it toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the 19. Close the front header latches.
bows and as far inward as possible. This will keep
20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
any portion of the top from flapping outside of the
Frame” in this section for further information.
vehicle.

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow) up and over the
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
sports bar until the header rests on the top of the
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door Frame”
windshield frame.
in this section for further information.
Raising The Soft Top

3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider® link
(Sunrider® Models only).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

5. Make sure the Sunrider® bracket on the side bows
latches to the door rails (Sunrider® Models only).

6. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
latches).

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

7. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them 8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
panels over the rear roof bow.
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body 10. To install the side windows, affix the window temposide channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the
rarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the rear corner. Start
rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on
the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
the rear roof bow (3–bow) will aid to reach the channel
with the retainers.

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

11. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate 14. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
when closed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the
swing gate brackets.

15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the
window.

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

17. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate 19. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
bracket on both the left and right sides.
their secured position.

18. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the
rear soft top bow (3–bow), then complete attaching
the sail panel retainers into the body side channel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
Please visit the owner’s section of Jeep.com for instructhe top can then be snapped into place. If the temperational videos.
ture is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
SOFT TOP — FOUR-DOOR MODELS

CAUTION!

The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting,
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle, and
thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.

CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty.
Grit may scratch the window.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
(Continued)

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING!

• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.

• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also open.
Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could
enter the vehicle.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.

NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment
knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top.

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top
1. Remove the side windows.

3. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
2. Remove the back window.
NOTE: Start zipper from the right side to remove back
window.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

4. Release the sail panel retainers from the body side NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft 6. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to the rear.
top.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

7. Release Sunrider® latch (both sides).

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

8. Open the swing gate and lower the top.

Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider® latches (another person may be needed to
help with this operation).

NOTE: Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of
the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

2. Install rear corner panels.

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Rotate the header forward.

4. Engage the header latches.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

5. Install the back window.

6. Install the side windows.

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

7. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door 8. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so can
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.
closing the zipper completely and attaching the
Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat
this step for the opposite side.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

Folding Down The Soft Top

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
4–Bow
Sail Panel

6 — Body Side Retainer
7 — Quarter Window
8 — Check Strap
9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1
2
3
4
5

—
—
—
—
—

Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the
vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and hooks from the loops
on the windshield frame.

4. Open the swing gate.

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove
the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out
of the swing gate brackets.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

6. Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
bracket on both the left and right sides.
unzip the window.

7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
top.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
the top.
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket
forward while rolling the entire bracket back in
toward the vehicle to disengage.

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

15. Fold back the front section of the top, pulling the
fabric rearward. Gently rest the header on top of the
rear portion of the deck.

17. Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch
above the front of the rear door. Push the top rearward
to disengage. Repeat this step on the other side.
16. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as
shown. Enter the vehicle and move the material into
two folds.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

18. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to 19. Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track
prevent possible damage to the rear center highand lower the top down into the vehicle.
mounted brake light. Grasp the folded side bows and
slide the top along the door frame track to the rear
door frame.

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation. 21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro® straps
provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping
the strap around the side bows and through the slot
on the body.

20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the
bows as far inside as possible. This will keep any
portion of the top from flapping outside of the 22. Close the front header latches.
vehicle.
23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

Putting Up The Soft Top

NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.

NOTE: Be extremely careful when putting up the soft
top to prevent the doors from getting scratched. It may be
helpful to open the rear doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section for further information.
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down
position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the
rear door frames.

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door
frame tracks and slide the top forward.

7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider® locking
mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear
doors.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.

9. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the
latches).

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

10. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them 11. Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before
by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow (4–bow).
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side 12. To install the side windows, affix the window temchannel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear
porarily by attaching it to the Velcro® in the upper
window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear
rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 in
roof bow (4–bow) will aid in reaching the channel with
(2.5 cm).
the retainers.

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

13. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do
so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to
the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at
the front and working to the rear of the vehicle.
Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching
the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window.
Repeat this step for the opposite side.

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate 16. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and
and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate
aligned before zipping to prevent damage.
when closed.

17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of
the window.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the
swing gate brackets.

20. Complete the installation of the sail panel by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body channel.
19. Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate
bracket on both the left and right sides.

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

21. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to SUNRIDER® (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF
their secured position.
EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

Opening The Sunrider®
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.

4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the
material is folded back as shown.

3. Slide the plastic sleeve forward.

286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Sunrider® latch on the door rail should not 5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. Wrap the
be activated for Sunrider® use. If activated, the soft top
straps around the bows as shown. Repeat on the other
must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels.
side.

6. Reposition the sun visors.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287

Closing The Sunrider®
1. Remove the straps from the side bows.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the
vehicle.

SUNRIDER® (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.

4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield frame, close latches, and return the sun visors to
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
their original positions.
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recom5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider® mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
link.

288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Opening The Sunrider®
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.

3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift
the top.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289

4. Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 5. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as shown.
the header on top of the rear portion of the deck.
Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.

290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

6. Secure the top by using the two provided straps. Each Closing The Sunrider®
strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro® to Perform the above steps in the opposite order.
itself; use one strap on each side of the vehicle.
NOTE: Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the
material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield and removable side bars on
your vehicle are structural elements that can provide
some protection in some accidents. The windshield also
provides some protection against weather, road debris
and intrusion of small branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down and the side bars removed as you lose the protection these structural elements can provide.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291

If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can be
removed and the windshield folded down. However, the
protection afforded by these features is then lost. If you
remove the side bars and fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as
the task that required their removal is completed and
before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and
off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised or
folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you
choose to remove the doors, see your authorized dealer for
a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.

WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the
folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars,
and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your
vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers protection in some accidents.
(Continued)

292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars
1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following
the instructions in this manual.
NOTE: To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, mark
the original locations prior to removing.
2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and the one 3. Remove the sun visor.
side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the trim (Do not 4. Remove the A-pillar cap.
remove plastic corner trim, sun visor bolts, or sport
5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with Uconnect®
bar covering).
phone).
6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293

7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the
plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar, one hex
bolt (13 mm) on the side of the side bar, and one hex
bolt (13 mm) on top of the side bar.
NOTE: Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.

CAUTION!
Do not remove the head impact foam from the side
bars, as damage to the foam may result.
NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport
bar Velcro® covering.
9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four
cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer).
Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor
behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage
bin cover.

294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you carry the side
bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the side bars from
the vehicle or securely store them as described or
they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs.
See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps.
10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling
the wiper away from the windshield and out to the
“lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps, and
remove the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and
store them in the center console or securely behind
the rear seat.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a battery terminal
puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the
shaft after the nuts have been removed.

11. Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the
six black round-headed Torx® head screws (using a
#40 Torx® head driver) on each side of the base of the
windshield.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295

12. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
rubber hood bumpers.
13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the footman hoop on the center of the hood
and on the center of the windshield frame. Tighten
the strap to secure the windshield in place.

Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars
1. Raise the windshield.
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar.
Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars” earlier in this section.

• Reattach the sport bar Velcro® covering.

296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield 5. Install the lower windshield plates with the six black
frame.
round-headed Torx® head screws (using a #40 Torx®
head driver) on each side of the base of the wind• Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the
shield.
lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The lower side bolt will
not align until the top two bolts are installed.

6. Reinstall the wiper arms.
4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297

REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped

Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.

Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to
A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever
activate the rear washer. The washer pump and
(located on the right side of the steering column) controls
the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is
the operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle two to three
times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The rear window defroster button is located on
the bottom right-side of the blower control knob.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster.
An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
For an additional five minutes of operation, press the
button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .302
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .304
䡵 COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .325

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ EVIC Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
▫ EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display) . . . .335

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 Uconnect® 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA
AUX JACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . .340 䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD
and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) . . .348
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files. . . . . . . . .350
▫ LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/
WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .360
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .368
▫ INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/
䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .369
WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .369
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .355

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for
CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .380
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .380
▫ Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .381
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .392
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .395
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . .395
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5
6

— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Assist Handle
— Glove Compartment
— Power Window Switches

7 — Climate Controls
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
11 — Horn

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge

3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
2. Charging System Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal
(10.6L) this light will turn on and a single chime
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the will sound.
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, and remain 5. Speedometer
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non- Indicates vehicle speed.
essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at 6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means
Indicates when the front axle lock has been
that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
activated.
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

7. Seat Belt Reminder Light

9. Oil Pressure Warning Light

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started; if the bulb does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.

8. Turn Signal Indicators

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

The left or right arrow will flash with the corre- 10. High Beam Indicator
sponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn
This indicator shows that the high beam headsignal lever is operated. A chime will sound if the vehicle is
lights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. away from you to switch the headlights to high beam.
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to
low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights
or park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light
will remain illuminated and a chime will sound.

In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

11. Brake Warning Light

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.

This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
function
check at vehicle start-up. If the light remains on
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
after
start-up
or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
may
indicate
that
the ABS has detected a malfunction or
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by non-anti-lock brakes.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apLight are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
“Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating”.
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

13. Air Bag Warning Light

CAUTION!

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
during starting, stays on, or turns on while 16. Coolant Temperature Warning Light
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
and
stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.
further information.
Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the
14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
been activated.
NOTE: As the coolant temperature gauge approaches
⬙H,⬙ this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound. Further overheating will cause the temperature
gauge to pass ⬙H.⬙ In this case, a continuous chime will
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute sound, until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes
(RPM x 1000).
duration is expired, whichever come first.
15. Tachometer

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You
may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

19. Cruise Indicator

22. Shift Lever Indicator

This indicator shows when the electronic speed The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
control system is turned on.
automatic transmission.
20. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
23. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and
should be checked monthly when cold and inrear driveshafts are mechanically locked toflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
rotate at the same speed.
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
21. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver India different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
cator) Button
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deterPress this button to change the display from odometer to mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
either of the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
display. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
odometer mode. Press and hold the button for two that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome- more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordters. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
24. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Odometer / Trip Odometer
/ ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) Button” for additional
information.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

Vehicle Odometer Messages

ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped

When the appropriate conditions exist, the following The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
odometer messages will display:
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator
LoW tirE
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display
will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swing Gate Ajar “HOTOIL” Transmission Temperature Warning Message
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure The “HOTOIL” cluster message will appear in the odometer
accompanied with a chime to indicate that there is excessive
HOTOIL . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe
Above Normal Limits usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur when
operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condigASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault tion, such as 4-wheel drive operation (e.g., snow plowing,
off-road operation). If this “HOTOIL” message turns on,
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the
transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off.
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage or
transmission failure.

WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could
cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of
an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle 26. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
drivability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.

WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop 27. O/D (Overdrive) OFF Indicator Light
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
This light will illuminate when the O/D OFF
caused the ESC activation.
button has been selected and overdrive has been
turned off. The O/D OFF button is located on the center
console.

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift
This indicator will illuminate when the front
lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should
sway bar is disconnected.
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
29. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
Light — If Equipped
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running,
28. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
trol (ESC) is off.
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN
30. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
This light informs you of a problem with the come on during starting, have the system checked by an
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a authorized dealer.
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

31. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display /
Compass Mini-Trip Computer Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. For further information, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center”.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to “MiniTrip Computer” for further information.

COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Compass/Trip Computer features a driver-interactive
display (displays information on outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information). It is located on the
lower left part of the cluster below the speedometer.

Compass Display

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
The Compass/Temperature control buttons are located
be driven several minutes before the updated temperaon the left spoke of the steering wheel.
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Control Buttons

The following displays can be reset or changed:
• Compass/Temperature
• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)
• ET (will reset display)
• DTE (distance to empty)
These messages can be cycled through by pressing the
STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset the AVG ECO
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
or ET, press and hold the STEP button for approximately
Press and release the STEP button on the steering wheel three seconds.
to access the options in the Compass display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

Compass/Temperature Display
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler
Uconnect® gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV system will
provide the compass direction, and the variance and
calibration menus will be unavailable. The compass will
perform accurately, based on GPS signals instead of the
Earth’s magnetic field.

Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.

Compass Variance Map

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately
10 seconds) until the current variance zone number is
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
displayed.
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the RESET
button on the steering wheel (for approximately ten sec- 3. Release the RESET button, then press and hold again
onds) until the current variance zone number is disfor approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
played. To change the zone, press and release the STEP
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in
button to increase the variance one step. Repeat as
the display.
necessary until the desired variance is achieved.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During programin one or more complete 360–degree circles, under
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and
zone 1.
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
To Set The Variance

If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the proper zone is selected.
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

NOTE:

• Distance To Empty (DTE)

• A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.

• Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top
of the center of the instrument panel. This is where the • Elapsed Time
compass sensor is located.
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
Average Fuel Economy / Distance To Empty (DTE) /
in the RUN or START positions. The elapsed timer
Elapsed Time
displays minutes:seconds. After 59minutes:59seconds, it
• Average Fuel Economy
displays hours:minutes:seconds.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the digits will go blank
while the history information is erased. The averaging
will restart when enough new distance and fuel data is
accumulated.

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Trip Conditions
Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) — If Equipped
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B
or to ECO. Press and hold the right button while the
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.

Trip Display Button

Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a The system allows the driver to select information by
variety of useful information by pressing the switches pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the wheel:
following:
• Compass Heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
• Outside Temperature (°F or °C)
• ECO Display
• Fuel Economy
• Miles/kilometers To Empty
• Timer
• Display Units Selection
• System Warnings (Door Ajar, etc.)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (If Equipped)

EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

MENU Button

SELECT Button

Press and release the MENU button to advance
Press and release the SELECT button when
prompted by the EVIC to Reset Main Menu
the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu
features with a reset capability or to change
features or to return to the Main Menu from a
sub-menu. Upon reaching the last item in the
Personal Settings.
Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the DOWN Button
Main Menu with the next MENU button press and
Press and release the DOWN button when
release.
prompted by the EVIC to step through stored
COMPASS Button
system warning messages or Personal Settings
Press and release the COMPASS button to
features.
return to the Compass/Outside Temperature/
Audio Information/ECO screen whenever the
current display is not the Compass/Outside
Temperature/Audio Information/ECO screen.

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays •
the following messages:
•
• Low Tire Pressure
•
• Service TPM System (refer to ⬙Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ in ⬙Starting and Operating⬙)
•
• Premium TPM System Graphic Display
• Damaged Key
• Key in Ignition
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Key Fob Battery Low (with a single chime)
Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle Not in Park —
automatic transmission
Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle in Motion —
manual transmission

• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
• Gate Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate/
back door open and A single chime )

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
And Operating” for more details)
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
the following procedure:
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: For features in the EVIC that can be reset (AverTo step to each main menu feature press and release the age Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time), the EVIC prompts
MENU button once for each step. A step from the last a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word
item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list RESET next to it.
to be displayed. The following features are in the Main When the SELECT button is pressed, the selected feature
menu:
will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the
SELECT button graphic. Pressing SELECT a second time
• Compass, Outside Temperature, and ECO display
will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time.
• Average Fuel Economy
After three seconds without pressing SELECT, RESET
ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature
• Distance to Empty
will have been reset.
• Elapsed Time
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If
• EVIC Units Selection
Equipped
EVIC Main Menu

• System Status
• Personal Settings
• Tire PSI

The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. Press and release the COMPASS button to display
one of eight compass headings, the outside temperature/
ECO if the EVIC display is not already displaying this
screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

Automatic Compass Calibration

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
The ECO message will display below the outside temthe EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
perature in the EVIC display (if the audio system is on
normally.
the ECO indicator will override the audio information
display line if the ⬙Display Fuel Saver⬙ personal setting is NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
ON — see ⬙Personal Settings⬙ section). This message will environment free from large metallic objects such as buildappear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Manual Compass Calibration

Compass Variance

If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order
the compass will automatically compensate for the differto enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
ences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the EVIC.
the top of the instrument panel; this is where the compass
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” sensor is located.
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
function normally.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

To Change The Compass Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch RUN (it is not necessary to
start the engine).
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) displays in the
EVIC.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
Compass Variance Map

4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Average Fuel Economy

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and
holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC
display). Upon reset, the history information will be
erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel
average reading before the reset.
Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is in the RUN or START position.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
hours:minutes:seconds
tank level. DTE cannot be reset.
Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
START.
Distance To Empty (DTE)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

EVIC Units Selection (UNITS IN Display)

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature, Features)
Average Fuel Economy and Distance to Empty features. Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
Press and Release the SELECT button to toggle units features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph (0 km/h)
(manual transmission) or when the shift lever is in PARK
between ⬙U.S.⬙ and ⬙METRIC⬙.
(auto transmission).
System Status
Press and release the MENU button until Personal SetDisplays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning
tings displays in the EVIC.
Messages stored. Pressing and releasing the DOWN
button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing. Use the DOWN button to display one of the following
Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are choices:
active Warning Messages stored. Pressing and releasing Language
the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT is displayed will display each stored warning for When in this display you may select one of five laneach button press. Press and Release the MENU button to guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
return to the Main Menu.
the SELECT button while in this display to select English,
Espanol or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Auto Lock Doors

RKE Unlock

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or
disabled, to make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.

When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.

Auto Unlk On Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “On” or “Off” appears.

Sound Horn With Lock
When on is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with
Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

Flash Lamp with Lock

Headlamps with Wipers (Available with Auto
When on is selected, the front and rear turn signals will Headlights Only)
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the When on is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxiwithout the Sound Horn with Lock feature selected. To mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. If the
make your selection, press and release the SELECT headlights were turned on by this feature they will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off. To make your
button until “On” or “Off” appears.
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
Headlamp Off Delay
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
“90” appears.

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Key Off Power Delay

Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.”
appears.

When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
Display Units In

The EVIC can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. The units apply to the Outside Temperature, Average Fuel Economy, and Distance to Empty.
Illumin. Approach
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate button until “U.S.” or ⬙METRIC⬙ appears.
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
Nav–Turn By Turn — If Equipped
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and hold the SELECT button until “Off,” When on enables display of Navigation System street
name, turn direction, and distance to turn information in
“30 sec,” “60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
the EVIC. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the compass / outside
temperature / audio information / ECO display. If
Display Fuel Saver is selected as ON, only the ECO
message will display in the audio information / ECO line
of the display. If Display Fuel Saver is selected as OFF,
only the audio information will display in the audio
information / ECO line of the display when the audio
system is on. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

Uconnect® 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)

Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.

Uconnect® 230

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

SEEK Buttons

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the another selection. Holding either button will bypass
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second stations without stopping, until you release it.
time to turn off the radio.
SCAN Button
Electronic Volume Control
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
The electronic volume control turns continuously the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
(360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turn- equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the volume and to the left decreases it.
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature and frequency display.
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
Clock Setting Procedure
details.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
details.
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.
TUNE Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control format types:
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
16-Digit Character
the front and rear speakers.
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
No program type or
None
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
undefined
MUSIC TYPE Button
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Classical
Classicl
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within
College
College
five seconds will allow the program format type to be
Country
Country
selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Foreign Language
Language
Music Type information.
Information
Inform
Jazz
Jazz
News
News
Nostalgia
Nostalga

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause -

• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE:

•
You can toggle between playing the DVD and
pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT
•
button (if equipped).
•
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch •
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).
•
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).

The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
These selections can only be made while playing a DVD.
VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and OFF
(if equipped).
VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls
(if equipped).
VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode
of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.

Audio Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the to select the number and then push to select.
user to scroll through the following items and set
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
defaults according to customer preference.
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
Menu Language — If Equipped
language (effective only if the language is supported by
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
language supported by disc). If you want to select a the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙ to select the number and then push to select.
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
Subtitles — If Equipped
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
customer-preferred settings.
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
AM and FM Buttons
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
Audio DRC — If Equipped

AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the
SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both
AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton
memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be
selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)

The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding of the player a maximum of five times.
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
position to operate the radio.
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
reading the disc.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)

CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
following restrictions.
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
Supported Media (Disc Types)
CD currently playing.
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
RW/FF (CD MODE)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
works in a similar manner.
files properly and may be unable to play the file norAM or FM Button (CD MODE)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
TIME Button (CD MODE)

Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

WMA
Specification
WMA

Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
44.1 and 48

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48

Bit Rate (kbps)
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are
supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.

Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.

LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, an ipod®, or a microphone and
utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s
volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud
enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX audio
sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.

Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for
five seconds.
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES™) (If Equipped)

DTS™

“DTS™ and “DTS™ 2.0” are trademarks of Digital TheRefer to “Video Entertainment System (VES™)” for fur- ater Systems, Inc.
ther details.
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Dolby®
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastManufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories. ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Dolby® Laboratories.
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chilMacrovision
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection limited coverage in Alaska.
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is System Activation
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
Number (ESN/SID)
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
Please have the following information available when the radio to exit this screen.
calling:
Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display.
Number (ESN/SID).
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SCAN Button

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
INFO Button
for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five section between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- onds will allow the program format type to be selected.
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
type.
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
to normal display).
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
RW/FF
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
direction of the arrows.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to Buttons 1 - 6
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect® 130

Refer to your Uconnect® user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
Uconnect® 130

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
TIME Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn and radio frequency.
off the radio.
Clock Setting Procedure
Electronic Volume Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
set at the same volume level as last played.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conlistenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
trol knob to save time change.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL AM/FM Button
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
mid-range tones.
RW/FF

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory

Buttons 1 - 6

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to
pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the
button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within five
seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will
continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton
memory.

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the
SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both
AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations
to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in
SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.

DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.

• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

CAUTION! (Continued)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
(Continued)

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

RW/FF

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
SEEK Button
button works in a similar manner.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
AM/FM Button
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
CD and MP3 modes.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranplaying time display to a small CD playing time display.
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Notes on Playing MP3 Files

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
• Maximum number of files: 255
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
Supported Media (Disc Types)
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
display.)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

24, 22.05, 16

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
not play the file.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an supported by the radios.
MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files supported.
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR
bit rate.

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Playback of MP3 Files

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected vehicle speakers.
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
CD-R media

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control

Uconnect® 130

The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Phone Button Uconnect® Phone — If Equipped
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understations without stopping, until you release it.
standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
SEEK Buttons

Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
Equipped

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature and radio frequency.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
trol knob to save time change.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the five seconds will allow the program format type to be
selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia

16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga

Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is AM/FM Button
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music
Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type When you are receiving a station that you wish to
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
station and press and release that button. If a button is
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
the following items:
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
save time change.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by MP3 Audio Play
pressing the pushbutton twice.
NOTE:
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
button number will display.
to operate the radio.
Buttons 1 - 6
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
stations).
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
DISC/AUX Button

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

SEEK Button

AM/FM Button

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

TIME Button

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.

Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
works in a similar manner.

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.

MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling
Frequency
(kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
Layer
3
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Playback of MP3 Files

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio
checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot
of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start
playing the MP3 files.

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time⬙ priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the limited coverage in Alaska.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

System Activation

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may
begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service
that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio
system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that
contains general information, including how to setup your
on-line listening account. For further information, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian
residents.

ESN/SID Access

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)

Selecting Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.

Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display.
Please have the following information available when A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® (Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons:
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes.

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SCAN Button

TUNE Control (Rotary)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect® Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device

This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console. USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
UconnectMultimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod®
or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
the vehicles iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
pressing radio switches, as described below.
audio device).
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disControlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
Using Radio Buttons
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/ To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX”
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
Using This Feature
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod®/USB/
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
connect to the USB port:
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Play Mode

• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.

When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
jump backward or forward respectively, for five secfaceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
onds.
USB device and display data:
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
previous track.
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
Track⬙.
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.

List Or Browse Mode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de- audio device.
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
and next tracks.
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
delay in updating the information on the radio
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display may be noticeable.
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (countersecond line.
clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
external USB device.
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn
• Preset 1 – Playlists
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
• Preset 2 – Artists
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
• Preset 3 – Albums
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
• Preset 4 – Genres
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Selecting A Different Audio Device

Previous Track

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track”, to jump to the
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say
previous music track on your cellular phone.
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Browse
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
Next Track
playing will display info.
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track”, to jump to the next music STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
track on your cellular phone.
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
1. Press the PHONE button to begin.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)

Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
will tune to the next preset station that you have promode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CD Player

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once precautions:
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
surface.
after the current track begins to play.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
wiping from center to edge.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
center button will select the next available CD in the
or anti-static sprays.
player.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off
Manual Temperature Control
during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect®
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
(if equipped).
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Blower Control

Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397

Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.

Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a
difference in temperature between the upper and lower
outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This
feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool
conditions.
Floor

Panel

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small
Air is directed through the outlets in the instruamount flowing through the defrost and side winment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct dow demist outlets.
airflow.
Mix
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
for maximum airflow to the rear.
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Defrost

NOTE:

Air is directed through the windshield and side • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiExtended use of this mode is not recommended.
mum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehuthe outside air position for maximum defogging.
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
Recirculation Control
control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbput the system in recirculation mode. This can
ing the mode control selection.
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres- • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

Air Conditioning Control

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when
the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Rotating the dial left into the blue area of
the scale indicates cooler temperatures,
while rotating right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, turn on the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE

Automatic Temperature Control

Automatic Operation

The Automatic Temperature Control system automatiIf economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operation of the system is quite simple.

The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72° F
(22° C) for the average person; however, this may vary.

1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
NOTE:
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.

NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat • The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
without affecting automatic operation.
occupants only.
Dial in the temperature you would like • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
the system to maintain by rotating the
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
Temperature Control knob. Once the
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
comfort level is selected, the system will
air conditioning is not necessary.
maintain that level automatically using
the heating system. Should the desired
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
comfort level require air conditioning,
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
the system will automatically make the adjustment.
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
reducing air conditioning performance.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

Blower Control

Manual Operation
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the
knob to the AUTO position. In manual
mode, there are seven blower speeds
that can be individually selected. In off
position, the blower will shut off.

This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and
• Panel
side window demist outlets.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
for maximum airflow to the rear.
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and mum blower and temperature settings for best windlower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. shield and side window defrosting.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Air Conditioner Control

NOTE:

Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to
the Mode control dial. Press this butimprove window clearing. Recirculation will be diston a second time to turn OFF the air
abled automatically if in defrost mode.
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
manual compressor operation is selected.
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
• Recirculation Control
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
The system will automatically control recircuSome temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
Control button will put the system in recircuvisibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
lation mode. This can be used when outside
recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
Attempting to use recirculation while in these modes
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
will cause the LED in the control button to blink and
the control button to illuminate.
then turn off.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level and then press
the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the
possibility of window fogging.

Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106
and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection.

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Winter Operation

Window Fogging

Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly reis not recommended because it may cause window moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
fogging.
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winVacation Storage
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air rainy or humid weather.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility long periods as fogging may occur.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407

Side Window Demisters

A/C Air Filter — If Equipped

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the
vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see
your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance
Schedules” for filter service intervals.

Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.

408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .418
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . .414

▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . .415

▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

▫ Reverse Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422

▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .424

䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .418

▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .424
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵 FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
(COMMAND-TRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®) . . . .433
▫ Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . .433
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435

▫ When To Use 4L (Low) Range. . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation. . .444
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .444

▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

䡵 TRAC-LOK® REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED . . .437

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

䡵 AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON
MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . .
▫ Side Step Removal – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
▫ The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . .443

. . . .453
. . . .455
. . . .456
. . . .456
. . . .459
. . . .460

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .461

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .481

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .482

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .487
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .466

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .467

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . .472

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .490

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . .474
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .479

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .492
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .493 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513

▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .494

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .514

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515

䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .499

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516

䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .500

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .501 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Premium and Base TPM System . . . . . . . . . . .504

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517

▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .508

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .519

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512

STARTING AND OPERATING 413

䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533

▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538

䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .540
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING! (Continued)

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.

STARTING AND OPERATING 415

Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
Starting” procedure.
start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the Tip Start Feature – Automatic Transmission Only
transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
Start the vehicle with the shift lever in the PARK position will continue to run, but will automatically disengage
(vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 secbrake before shifting to any driving range.
onds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
Normal Starting
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm Starting” procedure.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only

engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.

416 STARTING AND OPERATING

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and, once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Without Tip Start – Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.

STARTING AND OPERATING 417

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–second
periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the
floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures.

With Tip Start – Automatic Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

After Starting
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
WARNING!
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.

You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

CAUTION!

The engine block heater cord is found under the hood
bundled in front of the battery tray.

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC
electrical cord could cause electrocution.

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 419

Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds

Shift Pattern

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.

420 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine
3.6L

Speeds
Accel.
Cruise

Manual Transmission
1 to 2
15 (24)
10 (16)

Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
2 to 3
3 to 4
24 (39)
34 (55)
19 (31)
27 (43)

NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.

4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)

5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.

STARTING AND OPERATING 421

CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause valve damage, and/or clutch disc
damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

Gear Selection
Maximum
Speed

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.

Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)

NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.

5
2 to 1
15 (24)

422 STARTING AND OPERATING

Reverse Shifting
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear
train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL
position, move the shift lever in one quick, smooth
motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the
“knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the shift
lever into REVERSE.
The “knock-over” prevents the driver from accidentally
entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver
that they are about to shift the transmission into REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSE can
be perceived as a high shift effort.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 423

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.

(Continued)

424 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission

The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
Key Ignition Park Interlock
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
OFF position. The key can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the shift lever is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.

STARTING AND OPERATING 425

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).

will manually select the transmission gear (or, when the
transfer case is in the 4L range, the highest available
transmission gear) and will display that gear in the
instrument cluster as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Autostick® shift control
(refer to ⬙AutoStick®⬙ in this section) or (when the
transfer case is in the 4L range) the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation” in this section). Moving the shift
lever to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position

Shift Lever

426 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gear Ranges

PARK

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
NOTE:
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow vehicle in this range.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
especially important when the engine is cold.
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the OFF
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauposition first.
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

STARTING AND OPERATING 427

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of park (with the brake
pedal released). Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
remove the ignition key. Once the ignition key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

(Continued)

428 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.

STARTING AND OPERATING 429

NEUTRAL

CAUTION!

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

430 STARTING AND OPERATING

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section) to select a
lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 431

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control is only used
when the transfer case is in the 4L (Low) range. In the
transfer case 2H and 4H (High) positions, the AutoStick®
shift control is available (refer to ⬙AutoStick®⬙ in this
section).

the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift lever to
the left (-) will downshift the transmission, activate ERS
mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster,
and maintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+)
will change the top available gear.

To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
driver to limit the highest available gear when the
lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
transfer case is in the 4L (Low) position, and the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift

432 STARTING AND OPERATING

Overdrive Operation

WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed

1
1

2
1-2

3
1-3

4
1-4

D
1-5

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.

The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

STARTING AND OPERATING 433

FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
(COMMAND-TRAC I® OR ROCK-TRAC®)

WARNING!
Failure to engage a position completely can cause
transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle
control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

Operating Instructions/Precautions
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range)
• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range)

Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls

The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as hard-surfaced roads.

434 STARTING AND OPERATING

In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these
positions. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal
driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hardsurfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage
to the driveline components.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked
together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case
is shifted into the 4H position.

NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer, and the front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

STARTING AND OPERATING 435

WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle
to move regardless of the transmission position. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.

4H Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4H) provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on
dry pavement.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
N (Neutral) Position

This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Start4WD system mode position, see the information below:
ing and Operating” for further information.
2H Position
Shift Positions

This range is used for normal street and highway driving
on hard-surfaced roads.

436 STARTING AND OPERATING

4L Position

Shifting Procedure

This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4L) provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

2H to 4H or 4H to 2H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completThe “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument ing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted transfer case lever.
into the 4L position.
4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
NOTE: When in 4WD, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an
display in the instrument cluster.
automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case
lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the
transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,
place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

STARTING AND OPERATING 437

NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).

TRAC-LOK® REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok® rear axle provides a constant driving force
to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more
torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok® is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum
traction.

WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.

438 STARTING AND OPERATING

This feature will only activate when the following conThe AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument ditions are met:
panel (to the left of the steering column).
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK®) — RUBICON MODELS

• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
To activate the system, press the bottom of the AXLE
LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only (the “Rear
Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate), press the
bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle (the
“Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate). When
the rear axle is locked, pressing the switch again will lock
or unlock the front axle.
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
Axle Lock Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 439

To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE LOCK
switch.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
Sway Bar Switch
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
Press
the
SWAY
BAR
switch to activate the system. Press
located on the instrument panel (to the left of the steering
the
switch
again
to
deactivate
the system. The “Sway Bar
column).
Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar

440 STARTING AND OPERATING

Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.

WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h); you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The system monitors
vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is
indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator
Light.” Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to
return to off-road mode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the
off-road position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The
“Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side
to side.
To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY BAR switch
again.

STARTING AND OPERATING 441

WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss
of control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury. Contact your local authorized dealer
for assistance.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.

442 STARTING AND OPERATING

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal – If Equipped
NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.

3. Remove the side step assembly.

2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 443

The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore,
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.

WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low
speed pulling power. This range should be limited to

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep in- Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
clines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power
Snow
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to
CAUTION!
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. OverDo not use 4L (Low) range when operating the revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware dam- lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
age can result.
wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth,
while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving).
CAUTION!
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine brakused when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
steep incline.

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use
second gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a
1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction.
Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage
and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep
it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle
can be safely recovered if stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The

key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi
(103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and
handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way
to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

446 STARTING AND OPERATING

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)

Using A Spotter

While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.

WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.

Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with
your tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a

45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.

WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
Getting High-Centered
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up
on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best Before Climbing A Steep Hill
direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everyCAUTION!
thing looks good and you feel confident, shift the transWinching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects mission into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and
proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as
increases the risk of underbody damage.
you climb the hill.
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you
are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured or killed.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle heading
slightly up or down.

WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover , which may result in severe injury.

If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift
into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across
a hill, always drive straight up or down.

STARTING AND OPERATING 451

accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water
higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
ingestion.
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
CAUTION!
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know • Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transyour vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
fer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
or other vehicle components, and your brakes will
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift • This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at
into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (autoa depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at speeds no greater
matic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
than 5 mph (8 km/h). Water ingestion can occur
(Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant
causing damage to your vehicle.
slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and
light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to
Driving Through Water

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

Before You Cross Any Type Of Water

Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine Standing Water
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas norand walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You mally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters; determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you
current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed
will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the using the low and slow method.
vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the depth
and the ability to safely cross.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.

STARTING AND OPERATING 453

Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt
to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water.
Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow
water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is
still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with
slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. You should never attempt to
cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle’s
running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can
push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if
the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of
the vehicle’s body. Before you proceed, determine the speed
of the current, the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom
condition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an
angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.

WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.

WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
and cleaned as soon as possible.
correct the situation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 455

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
The standard power steering system will give you good
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
does not in any way damage the steering system.
steering capability if power assist is lost.
POWER STEERING

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.

WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of
the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid
temperature and it should be avoided when possible.
Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 457

The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.

Parking Brake

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position on an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 459

CAUTION!

WARNING!

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.

Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed selftest at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason your
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the (20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse (40 km/h).
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the
regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a
surfaces.
low humming noise during operation; this is normal.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can they increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is
functioning.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),

STARTING AND OPERATING 461

Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Hill Descent Control
(HDC). All of these systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as ESC.

WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
TCS and ESC are in either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
modes. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for further information.

462 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.

WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.

STARTING AND OPERATING 463

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

WARNING! (Continued)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.

another vehicle or object. To avoid this, do not apply
throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are
ready to release the clutch. Always remember the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped

WARNING!

• Vehicle must be on an 8% or greater incline (3% for
manual transmission equipped vehicles)

If the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) remains pressed during the application of the throttle,
the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll
down the incline. This could cause a collision with

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

(Continued)

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in DRIVE (automatic transmission equipped vehicle),
and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.

HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, and all forward gears
on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission.
The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL.
HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, forward gears, and
NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles.
The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual
vehicles, thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a
short period while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch
position. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll down a
hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and
letting gravity act on the vehicle, as the HSA will prevent
the vehicle from rolling. Instead, use the appropriate gear
for moving in the desired direction.

STARTING AND OPERATING 465

Towing With HSA

WARNING! (Continued)

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.

WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off if
the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

466 STARTING AND OPERATING

HSA Off

6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this 7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC
procedure:
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will blink
several times to confirm HSA is off.
1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK (automatic
transmission) or NEUTRAL with clutch out (manual Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off
transmission) with wheels straight. Apply parking brake HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enable HSA functionality.
on manual transmission vehicle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
2. Start the engine.
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
3. With the engine running, the brake applied, and the monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
clutch out, rotate the steering wheel 180° counterclock- of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change
of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient
wise from center.
to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the appropriate
4. Press the ESC OFF switch four times within
brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance
twenty seconds.
that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clock- very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
wise from center).

STARTING AND OPERATING 467

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.

WARNING! (Continued)
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.

NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off”
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) for a complete explanation of the available
ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
(Continued)

This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster), starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when
TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

The ESC system has three available operating modes in
4H range. The system has one operating mode in 4L
range. Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive
vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes.
4H Range (4WD Models)
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H range.

Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC
OFF switch.

ESC OFF Switch

When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion of ESC has
been disabled and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
This mode is entered by pressing and holding momenIndicator Light” will be illuminated.
tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch for 5 seconds.
ESC Off

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

All other stability features of ESC function normally. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.

When in ESC Off mode, ESC and TCS, except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section, are
turned off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the
ESC OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.

With the ESC in ⴖFull Offⴖ mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features offered by ESC and
ERM are disabled. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. The “Full Off” ESC
mode is intended for off-road use only.

WARNING!

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in
ESC Off
the PARK position from any position other than PARK,
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range. and then moved out of the PARK position. This will
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the transfer occur even if the message was previously cleared.
case (if equipped) is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to
4L range, the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4L range,
WARNING!
ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip” feature described
in the TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches a With the ESC switched off in 4L, the enhanced
speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are unnormal ESC stability function returns but TCS remains off. available.
When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h), the
2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models
ESC system shuts off. The ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in
4L range so that it will not interfere with off-road driving, On
but the ESC function returns to provide the stability feature
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2H range
at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESC Activation/
and on 2WD vehicles.
Malfunction Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in
4L range when ESC is off.
4L Range (4WD Models)

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

Partial Off
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC has
been disabled and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
All other stability features of ESC function normally. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the
ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it
may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off” mode by
pressing the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation requiring
ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF
switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
“Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESP system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates
when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be
adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions. The
speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Gear

Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving.
HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in
off-road driving conditions by applying the brakes when
necessary.
The symbol indicates the status of the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will
be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.

1st
2nd
3rd
4th
DRIVE
REVERSE

Approximate HDC
Set Speed
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2.5 mph (4 km/h)
4 mph (6.5 km/h)
5.5 mph (9 km/h)
7.5 mph (12 km/h)
1 mph (1.5 km/h)

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

However, the driver can override HDC operation by
applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the
HDC control speed. If more speed is desired during HDC
control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed
in the usual manner. When either the brake or the
accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle at the
original set speed.
Enabling HDC
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Descent
Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
turn on solid.

NOTE: If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range, the
“Hill Descent Control Indicator Light” will flash for
five seconds and HDC will not be enabled.
Disabling HDC
Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the transfer case
out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill Descent Control
Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

NOTE:

Tire Markings

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo- • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded
into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location

Tire Placard Location (Four-Door Model)

Tire Placard Location (Two-Door Model)

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading

Tire and Loading Information Placard

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
• For the following example, the combined weight of
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(392 kg).
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic
and unpredictable steering response.

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patUnequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
vehicle to drift left or right.
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

Tire Inflation Pressures
Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.

WARNING!

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
All Season Tires – If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
meets the following criteria:
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The tire has not been driven on when flat,
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable) and
Tire Repair

• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm)

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
your vehicle.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Snow Tires
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
(Continued)

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.

WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

WARNING! (Continued)
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to
replaced.
replacement tires in this section for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators

Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
Replacement Tires
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many those of the original wheels.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with the use of a
traction device that meets the SAE type “Class S”
specification is recommended.

WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.

CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference
on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause
damage to the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.

Tire Rotation

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven; this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure
must be increased to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
receive this information.
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) air pressure of
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. The TPMS pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
the tire.
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
Premium and Base TPM System
failure or condition.
NOTE:

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
while adjusting your tire pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. readings to the Receiver Module.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
stopping ability.
the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to
sound.

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, , a “LOW
TIRE PRESSURE” message will display in the
EVIC, and an audible chime will be activated when one
or more of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. The system will automatically
update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain on solid when
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. A
system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:
Base Tire Pressure Monitoring

Premium Tire Pressure Monitoring
Vehicles equipped with a EVIC will display specific tire
pressure information. When tire pressure is low the low
tire ISO telltale will illuminate and the EVIC will display
actual individual tire pressure when the tire pressure is
lower than the Placard Value.

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
Vehicles not equipped with EVIC will inform the driver
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
which tire(s) are low but not provide actual tire pressure.
TPM sensors.
The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate along with “LoTIrE”
message displayed in the ODO and then it will scroll to 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
which tire location is lower than the Placard Value.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
Tire location will be displayed as follows:
housings.
LF = Left Front
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
rF = right Front
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Lr = Left rear
rr = right rear

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
be ON, and a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn
OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as
long as none of the road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that

has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition
key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size spare
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires.
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
readings to the Receiver Module.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an aucheck the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of
the proper pressure.
the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for
a minimum of five seconds, an “Inflate to XX” message
following components:
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the
• Receiver Module
low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instru• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, ment Panel” for further information.
Premium System – If Equipped

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
Center (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

system will automatically update, the graphic display of
the pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
inflation value shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. The

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of the
pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙

The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

(24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
Telltale Light” as long as none of road tires are below the
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
low pressure warning threshold.
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
NOTE:
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will still
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
ON, a chime to sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
message to appear in the EVIC, and the graphic display
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
will still show the low tire pressure value “flashing.”
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.

General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a following licenses:
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
MRXC4W4MA4
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in United States
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
Reformulated Gasoline
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such prove air quality.
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
before considering service for the vehicle.
fuel system components.

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containgenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
E-85 perform the following:
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• change the engine oil and oil filter
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
engine controller memory
and California reformulated gasoline.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Materials Added To Fuel
exposure to E-85 fuel.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain
MMT In Gasoline
effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl) or other additives is not needed under normal conditions
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline should not have to add anything to the fuel.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION! (Continued)

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.

ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is the correct one for this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Cap

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.

WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)

NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will VEHICLE LOADING
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
Certification Label
the vehicle is refueled.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety AdminLoose Fuel Filler Cap Message
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
bottom of the label is your VIN.
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Rim Size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
listed.
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and the brakes operate.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Loading

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.

Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to measure
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the
hicles used for trailer towing.
scale.

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be
more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped

Weight-Distributing Hitch

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)

Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/Manual

3.21

3.6L/Manual

3.73

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,296 lbs
(2 856 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,296 lbs
(2 856 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,309 lbs
(2 862 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

3.21

Two–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)

3.6L/Manual

3.73

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,309 lbs
(2 862 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,355 lbs
(2 883 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,355 lbs
(2 883 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

4.10

Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
2–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,368 lbs
(2 888 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,368 lbs
(2 888 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,445 lbs
(2 923 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

STARTING AND OPERATING 529

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/
Automatic

4.10

3.6L/Manual

3.21

3.6L/Manual

3.73

Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
Two–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,458 lbs
(2 929 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,458 lbs
(2 929 kg)

25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

6,552 lbs
(2 972 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,052 lbs
(3 652 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

530 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

3.21

3.6L/Manual

3.73

Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sport Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,566 lbs
(2 978 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,066 lbs
(3 659 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

6,768 lbs
(3 070 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,268 lbs
(3 750 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

STARTING AND OPERATING 531

Engine/
Transmission

Axle

Model

3.6L/
Automatic

3.21

3.6L/
Automatic

3.73

3.6L/Manual

4.10

Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara
Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Rubicon
Model
(4WD)

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,782 lbs
(3 076 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

2,000 lbs
(907 kg)

200 lbs
(91 kg)

8,282 lbs
(3 757 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

8,334 lbs
(3 780 kg)

32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)

3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)

350 lbs
(159 kg)

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

Engine/
Transmission
3.6L/
Automatic

Axle
4.10

Model

GCWR
(Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
8,347 lbs
(3 786 kg)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW
(Gross
Trailer Wt.)

Four–Door
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Rubicon
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
Model
(4WD)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie.
the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.

Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
350 lbs
(159 kg)

Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.

STARTING AND OPERATING 533

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on • The weight of the driver and all passengers.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:
Consider the following items when computing the NOTE: Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubricant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid type.
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 535

WARNING! (Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into first gear. And
with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:

(Continued)

1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements – Tires

Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes

– Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
– Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
– Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for proper
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
– When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor2,000 lbs (907 kg).
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
inspection procedure.

STARTING AND OPERATING 537

CAUTION!

WARNING! (Continued)

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four–pin wiring
harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.

538 STARTING AND OPERATING

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle Towing Tips
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
Refer to the following illustration.
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a
lower gear range.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground

4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.

STARTING AND OPERATING 539

If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving

NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
before towing.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped

Highway Driving

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

Reduce speed.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed Air Conditioning
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
Turn off temporarily.
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE

•
•
•
•

Dolly Tow
On Trailer

Front
Rear
ALL

Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Manual transmission in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL [N])
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK

STARTING AND OPERATING 541

Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N), automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK,
and manual transmission must be placed in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not
in Neutral) for recreational towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.

542 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.

WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

STARTING AND OPERATING 543

8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is
no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine OFF.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.

11. Firmly apply the parking brake.

13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral).
14. Release the parking brake.

544 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for (N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
gear clash.
normal usage.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it conmanual transmission in Neutral.
nected to the tow vehicle.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

9. Release the brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but 11. Start the engine.
do not start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.

13. Release the parking brake.

6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.

7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .546 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .546

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556

䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .547

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558

▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .561
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554

▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565

546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)

548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage
compartment.
Jack Storage

NOTE: Turn the black plastic wing nut counter clockwise to loosen the jack from the storage bin.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549

NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the
spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight
of 69 lbs (31.3 kg) including the weight of the spare tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.

WARNING!

Jack Wing Nut

Spare Tire Stowage

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.

To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug
3. Set the parking brake.
wrench turning them counterclockwise.

550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a Jacking Instructions
manual transmission into REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing out.

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored
location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.

552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.

Front Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
Raise the vehicle till the tire is raised from the surface
of the road. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
Rear Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.

6
Lug Nut Installation

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
and remove the jack.

WARNING!

9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alter- hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the venate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in the places provided.
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked Road Tire Installation
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
a service station.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper localug nuts.
tions.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
handle counterclockwise.
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
CAUTION!
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
nut is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the correct other booster source with a system voltage greater
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
your authorized dealer or service station.
alternator or electrical system may occur.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.

556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of
the engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution
Center.

Positive Battery Post

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.

558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559

Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.

8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
9. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
you should have the battery and charging system in- REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and
REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressspected at your authorized dealer.
ing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.

560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated
tow strap.

CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.

562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located to the right of
the shift lever).
4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.

Shift Lever Override Access Cover

5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port,
and push and hold the override release lever down.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563

7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.

9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed

Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE

Front
Rear
ALL

4WD MODELS
See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in Neutral)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD

564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.

CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

Without The Ignition Key
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
position, not the ACC position.
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc- prevent damage to the vehicle.
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK
for towing.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565

Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the
transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is
in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT
in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.

CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .569

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .570

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .570

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .579

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .573
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . .594

568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . .597
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .607
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .615
. .615
. .616
. .616
. .616
. .617
. .617
. .618
. .619

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1
2
3
4
5
6

— Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Battery
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover)
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir

7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571

gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 3. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
system is ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.

572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was turer’s warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573

DEALER SERVICE

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)

574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a
warmed up engine has been shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575

Change Engine Oil

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
been certified by the American PeRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informatroleum Institute (API). The manution.
facturer only recommends API CerNOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intertified engine oils.
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine

Materials Added To Engine Oil

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating The manufacturer strongly recommends against the additemperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
partment” illustration in this section.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
NOTE: SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat 9.55535-S1 indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
oil meeting MS- 6395 is not available.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic Engine Oils
your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomEngine Oil Filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
are followed.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577

Engine Oil Filter Selection

WARNING! (Continued)

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
maintenance intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
Maintenance-Free Battery
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
(Continued)

578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579

Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.

580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

A/C Air Filter

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroWARNING!
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning operating or personal injury may result.
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to reNOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
place the filter:
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
oil, and refrigerants.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581

4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the two
air filter access doors to the HVAC housing.

5. Open the two air filter access doors.

6. Remove the two particulate air filters from the HVAC
air inlet housing. Pull the filter elements straight out of
the housing, one at a time.

582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position Body Lubrication
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal. Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
CAUTION!
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubriThe A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operato properly install the filter will result in the need to tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
replace it more often.
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compoRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
maintenance intervals.
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583

Windshield Wiper Blades

Adding Washer Fluid

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade perforfrom a dry windshield.
mance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending rating information can be found on most washer fluid
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor- containers.
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable.
They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer solution.

WARNING!

Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585

CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.

586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587

Engine Coolant Checks

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C conIf the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
denser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at Material Standard MS-12106.
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
entire system for leaks.
maintenance intervals.

588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Selection Of Coolant

CAUTION! (Continued)

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, it should be flushed
with OAT coolant and replaced with the specified
OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
(Continued)

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589

important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioncoolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
engine cooling system.
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maindard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
the vehicle is operated.
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
Material Standard MS-12106.
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen- Cooling System Pressure Cap
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.

590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING!
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pres- emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
sure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent spills immediately.
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591

Engine Coolant Level

Points To Remember

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en- evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
a month.
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) maintenance intervals.
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY Power Disc Brakes
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593

Brake Master Cylinder

WARNING! (Continued)

The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system
for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
(Continued)

damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)

594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for fluid specifications. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using
the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595

Special Additives

Fluid Level Check

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
any special additives in the transmission.
at normal operating temperature (approximately 180° F
(82° C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
driving. At normal operating temperature, the fluid
product and its performance may be impaired by supplecannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this Use the following procedure to check the transmission
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid fluid level properly:
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
adversely affect seals.
2. Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.

3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.

596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi- NOTE:
tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully en• The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the
gage in each position), ending with the shift lever in
actual level is at or above the hole.
PARK.
• If it is necessary to check the transmission below the
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
operating temperature, the fluid level should be beseated.
tween the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80° F (27° C). If the
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
fluid level is correctly established at 80° F (27° C), it
should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
when the transmission reaches 180° F (82° C). RememThe fluid level should be between the HOT (upper)
reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating
ber it is best to check the level at the normal operating
temperature.
temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through
the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill. After adding any quantity of oil through the
dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the
oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597

CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50° F (10° C), it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.

In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission) –
If Equipped

The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
Vehicle” for further information.
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is Manual Transmission – If Equipped
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
Selection Of Lubricant
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmisengaged in the dipstick tube.
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
Fluid And Filter Changes
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.

598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Fluid Level Check

Transfer Case

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid Fluid Level Check
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
point not more than 3/16 in (4.76 mm) below the bottom
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, it should be changed immediately. Otherwise,
change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599

Adding Fluid

Front/Rear Axle Fluid

Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
begins to run out of the hole.
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
Drain
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug (C). The fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaplugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
tion.

CAUTION!
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten them.
You could damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.

Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.

600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
resistance built into your vehicle.
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
What Causes Corrosion?
Selection Of Lubricant

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601

Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.

CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.

602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
the owner.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603

Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.

CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent , then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to Glass Surfaces
clean vinyl upholstery.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial householdWARNING!
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
Many are potentially flammable and, if used in with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window
equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
directly on the mirror.
cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance

CAUTION!
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior
trim and top, follow these precautions:
• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
trim.

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. • Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605

• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
WASHING — Use MOPAR® Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft
bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use MOPAR®
Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild
foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
RINSING — Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force past the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)

606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows

plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.

CAUTION!

3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.

Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows
which can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:

4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you
must clean the window quickly.

1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a 5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have a major impact on zipper operation.
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the
window, not up and down. MOPAR® Jeep Soft Glass
will eventually impact window zipper operation.
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607

To maintain ease of use of the window zippers, each
window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated
regularly. Use MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and
Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation.
Before applying, make sure the zipper teeth are clear
of sand, mud, and other materials. Clean both sides of
the zipper, not just one side. Rinse both zipper halves
with fresh water and allow to dry. Aggressively work
the MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant
or equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a stuck zipper
slide is experienced, work the MOPAR® Soft Top
Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the
zipper slide. Several applications may be required
before the zipper comes free.

FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the cover.

6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
Totally Integrated Power Module

608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6

Cartridge Fuse
—
30 Amp Pink
—
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

J8
J9
J10
J11
J12
J13

—
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
60 Amp Yellow

Mini Fuse

Description
—
Transfer Case Module
—
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/Stability
Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/Stability
Control System
—
PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel
Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve
Sway Bar
Rear Blower Motor/Radiator Fan
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609

Cavity
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6

Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
—

Mini Fuse

15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
—
25 Amp Natural
20 Amp Yellow

Description
Rear Defroster
Front Blower
Starter Solenoid
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range
Radiator Fan
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
Spare
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch
Stop Lamp Feed
Relay Trailer Lighting (Stoplamp)
Frt/Rear Axle Locker Relay
—
Power Inverter – If Equipped
Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor

610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
M7
M8
M9
M10

Cartridge Fuse

Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue

M11

10 Amp Red

M12
M13

30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow

M14

20 Amp Yellow

Description
Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)
Front Heated Seat
Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped
Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System,
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD,
Hands-Free Module, RADIO, Antenna, Universal
Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp
(Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System,
Underhood Lamp
Amplifier
Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment Node,
Wireless Control Module, SIREN, Multifunction
Control Switch
Trailer Tow (Export Only)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611

Cavity
M15

Cartridge Fuse

Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow

M16
M17
M18
M19
M20

10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue

M21
M22
M23
M24
M25

20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp Natural
20 Amp Yellow

Description
Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror, Cabin
Compartment Node, Transfer Case Switch, MultiFunction Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor,
Glow Plug Module – Export Diesel Only
Airbag Module
Left Tail/License/Park Lamp
Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp
Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch
Bank
Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)
Right Horn (HI/LOW)
Left Horn (HI/LOW)
Rear Wiper
Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only

612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34

Cartridge Fuse

Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red

M35
M36
M37

10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red

M38

25 Amp Natural

Description
Power Window Switch, Driver Window Switch
Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module
Powertrain Control Module
Powertrain
Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
Backup Lamps
Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE
Powertrain Controller
Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp
Wash, Compass
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet
Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability
Control, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Relay
Lock/Unlock Motors

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613

CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
• Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) and
store it in a safe location within the PDC.
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.

614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

REPLACEMENT BULBS

Exterior Bulbs

Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
658

Automatic Transmission Indicator
Lamp
Heater Control Lamps (2)
194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp
**
(Rear Window Defogger, and Rear
Wash/Wipe)
Soundbar Dome Lamp
912
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.

Headlamps (2)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2)
Front Side Marker Lamps (2)
Fog Lamps
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Backup Lamps (2)
License Lamp

Bulb Number
H13
3157
168
PSX24W
3157
L.E.D.
3157
194

NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be
purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615

BULB REPLACEMENT

6. Remove the lamp from the collar.

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually 9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
accelerate the clearing process.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
Headlamp
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
connector locking tab to the lock position.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4
turn counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining
ring.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn
clockwise.

616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Front Park/Turn Signal

Front Fog Lamp

1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the 1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
fog lamp.
2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.

2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.

3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise 3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and
and remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
the socket to replace.
back of the front fog lamp housing.
Front Side Marker
1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front
side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn
and remove it from the housing. Pull the bulb straight
from the socket to replace.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp

3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise, then remove it from the housing.

1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light
housing to the body. DO NOT REMOVE THE 4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
OUTER SCREWS AT ANY TIME.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service
is needed, obtain the LED/Cover Assembly from your
local authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in
place on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED
cover.
2. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the
lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the
body.

618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate) — Two Door Models
Fuel (Approximate) — Four Door Models
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S.
18.6 Gallons
22.5 Gallons

Metric
70 Liters
85 Liters

6 Quarts

5.6 Liters

10.5 Quarts

9.9 Liters

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane

620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear)

Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you only use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Manual Transmission Lubricant.
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90)
(API GL-5).
226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle
Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use
MOPAR® Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok™ require an additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4,
MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 N
C
E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .622

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Invehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odommiles (805 km).
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623 M

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
• Inspect all door latches for presence of grease,
reapply if necessary.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

64,000

30,000
48,000

32,000

20,000

M 624 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the
E
N
Mileage or time passed
A
(whichever comes first)
N
C
E
Or Years: 2
3
Or
Kilometers:
S
C
H
E
D Additional Inspections
U Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
X
L Inspect front suspension, tie rod
E
X
S ends, and replace if necessary.
the front and rear axle
8 Inspect
X
fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
X
brake function.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
X

X
X

Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace spark plugs **
Replace the ignition cables.
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

20,000

Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)

32,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 625 M

X
X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, snow plowing,
heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or
more than 50% of your driving is
at sustained high speeds during
hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter(s).

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

M 626 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E

Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any
of the following: trailer towing,
snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service
(commercial service), off-road,
desert operation or more than
50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Change transfer case fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

20,000

Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)

32,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 627 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
X

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

M 628 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E

S Inspect and replace PCV valve if
C necessary.
H Change front and rear axle fluid
E if using your vehicle for police,
X
D taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
U trailer towing.
L
E ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
S

yearly intervals do not apply.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 629 M

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .635

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .634
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .635
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635

▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638

632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .638

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .639

▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641

▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Authorized dealer name
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
solved with this process.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
They want to know if you need assistance.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
Phone: (877) 426–5337
center.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
(Continued)

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637

WARNING! (Continued)
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the manufacturer.
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
MOPAR® PARTS
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are individual problems between you, your authorized
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom- dealer, and the manufacturer.
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.

638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 639

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Call toll free at:

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com

Owner’s Manuals

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.

The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.

640 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Treadwear

Traction Grades

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 641

Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

644 INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .577
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .22
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .399
Automatic Transaxle
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

INDEX 645

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet)
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.424
.597
.597
.597
.595
.594
.595
.431
.184
.184
.438

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .28
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .99
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.517
.456
.589
.100
.174
.601

646 INDEX

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .315
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.319
.322
.321
.319

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.386
.386
.191
.191
.636
.589
.586
.588
.618
.591
.590
.587
.587
.591

INDEX 647

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .184
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Dipsticks
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.589
.589
.588
.600
.310
.190
.633

648 INDEX

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .180
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .318
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .319
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .571
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

INDEX 649

Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . .
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal .
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting
Fluid Capacities . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.577
.407
.576
.576

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.546
.103
.172
.416
.618
.104
.599
.574

Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.598
.456
.619
.172
.616
.163
.165
.290
.546
.433
.433
.559
.599
.513
.517
.515
.513
.514
.517

650 INDEX

Gasoline . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . .
Materials Added
Methanol . . . . .
Octane Rating . .
Requirements . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fueling . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.513
.304
.515
.514
.513
.513
.618
.517
.607

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.517
.513
.513
.513

.
.
.
.

.309
.304
.312
.304

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . . . . .
Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Top, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch

.
.
.
.
.

.115
.206
.206
.214
.546

.
.
.
.

.170
.615
.172
.172

INDEX 651

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . .
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . .
Hill Descent Control Indicator
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . .

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .177
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.172
.615
.169
.162
.114
.160
.395
.418
.305
.474
.474
.463

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

652 INDEX

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . .315
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .472
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . .318
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

INDEX 653

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .304
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573

654 INDEX

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .315
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . .
Monitor, Tire Pressure System
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.206
.501
.572
.514

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

INDEX 655

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .483
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

656 INDEX

Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .589 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .392
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Rear Swing Gate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .542 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .544 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580

INDEX 657

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .56
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Security Against Theft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

658 INDEX

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492

Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .392
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613

INDEX 659

Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . .
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunrider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .62
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
General Information . . . . . . . . .
Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .399
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .482

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.476
.103
.496
.487
.499
.547
.493
.487
.490
.489
.547
.496
.482
.501
.310
.639
.491
.497
.500

660 INDEX

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.476
.477
.492
.549
.495
.496
.476
.532
.167
.561
.522
.130
.563
.526
.540
.526
.130
.437
.461

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .473
. . . . . . . . . . . .522
. . . . . . . . . . . .539
. . . . . . . . . . . .525
. . . . . . . . . . . .533
. . . . . . . . . . . .532
. . . . . . . . . . . .537
. . . . . . . . . . . .526
. . . . . . . . . . . .526
. . . . . . . . . . . .598
. . . . . . . . . . . .433
. . . . . . . . . . . .598
. . . . . . . . . . . .594
. . . . . . . . . . . .424
. . . . . . . . . . . .418
. . . . . . . . . . . .310
. . . . . . . . . . . .422
Keyless Entry) . .28
. . . . . . . . . . . .496

INDEX 661

.319 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
.312 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
.310
.171 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .304
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .386 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer Reset Button.
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

662 INDEX

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.

2013 Wrangler

2013
OWNER’S MANUAL

Chrysler Group LLC
13JK72-126-AF

Sixth Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Wrangler
Includes Wrangler Unlimited

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Create Date                     : 2013:10:03 10:23:15-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2013:10:10 15:32:48-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:10:10 15:32:48-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Macintosh)
Instance ID                     : uuid:ca197b11-413d-4e8a-86db-d2027a820fc0
Original Document ID            : xmp.did:B8BC9D61201E11688507CD34934C9F05
Document ID                     : xmp.id:16E016F20E2068118083CB522B6915C5
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:15E016F20E2068118083CB522B6915C5
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:49E6D5920A2068118083CB522B6915C5
Derived From Original Document ID: xmp.did:B8BC9D61201E11688507CD34934C9F05
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
History Action                  : converted
History Parameters              : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Macintosh)
History Changed                 : /
History When                    : 2013:10:03 10:23:15-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2013 Jeep Wrangler Owner's Manual
Description                     : 13JK72-126-AF
Creator                         : 6th Edition
Subject                         : 1617756 (Copied DVD JT-135528 to current number.), (Brand site only edit on page 549. Updated gross weight value.)
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0.1
Trapped                         : False
Keywords                        : 1617756 (Copied DVD JT-135528 to current number.) ..(Brand site only edit on page 549. Updated gross weight value.)
Page Count                      : 666
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : 6th Edition

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Jeep 2013 Wrangler Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation